ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻣﻊ
www.rasekhoon.net/software
A
LT
X
E
ﻣﺮﺗﻀﯽ ﺍﺑﻄﺤﯽ
ﻋﻀﻮ ﻫﯿٔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺩﺍﻣﻐﺎﻥ
www.rasekhoon.net/software
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
ﭘﯿﺶﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ
ﺍﻟﻒ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
ﯾﮏ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ
ﯾﺎﺯﺩﻩ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ
ﺳﯿﺰﺩﻩ
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
۱
۱
۱.۱
ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱
۲.۱
TEXﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳
۳.۱
LaTEXﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۶
ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ،ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ٔ
۷
۱.۳.۱
۴.۱
۲.۳.۱
ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
۳.۳.۱
ﯼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LaTEX
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩ ِ
۸
۴.۳.۱
ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﯿﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
۹
۵.۳.۱
ﭼﺮﺍ LaTEX؟
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۴
ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۶
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﯾﮏ
۷
www.rasekhoon.net/software
ﺩﻭ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
۵.۱
ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۹
۶.۱
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲۲
۱.۶.۱
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲۲
۲.۶.۱
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲۴
۳.۶.۱
ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲۹
۴.۶.۱
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳۳
۵.۶.۱
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳۷
۶.۶.۱
ﻃﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴۲
۷.۶.۱
ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴۸
۸.۶.۱
ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴۹
۹.۶.۱
ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵۷
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵۷
۱.۷.۱
ﺷﮑﻞِ ﻗﻠﻢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵۸
۲.۷.۱
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۶۱
۳.۷.۱
ﻗﻠﻢ Timesﻭ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ِ
۶۳
۸.۱
ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺁﻥ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۶۷
۹.۱
ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۶۹
۱۰.۱ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷۲
۱۱.۱ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷۵
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ
۷۹
۷.۱
۲
۱.۲
ﺧﻂ ،ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷۹
۱.۱.۲
ﺧﻄﻮﻁ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۸۰
۲.۱.۲
ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۸۱
www.rasekhoon.net/software
ﺳﻪ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻫﺎ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۸۲
۳.۱.۲
۲.۲
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۸۳
۳.۲
ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗٔﺎﮐﯿﺪ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۹۰
۴.۲
ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۹۳
۱.۴.۲
ﻭﺳﻂﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۹۳
۲.۴.۲
ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۹۴
۳.۴.۲
ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۹۶
۴.۴.۲
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﻌﺮ ۱۰۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۴.۲
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ۱۰۱ . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۲
۶.۲
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﺑﻨﺪﯼ ۱۰۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۵.۲
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻪﻫﻢﺭﯾﺨﺘﻪ ۱۰۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۵.۲
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ ۱۱۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۵.۲
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ۱۱۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۵.۲
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ۱۱۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۱۱۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۶.۲
ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۱۲۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۶.۲
ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺟﺪﺍﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ۱۲۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۶.۲
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۱۲۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۶.۲
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ،ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺮ ،ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ؟ ۱۲۹ .
۵.۶.۲
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ،ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ،ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ؟ ۱۳۱ . .
۶.۶.۲
ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۱۳۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . array
۷.۶.۲
ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ۱۳۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷.۲
ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﯽ ۱۴۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۸.۲
ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ۱۴۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
www.rasekhoon.net/software
ﭼﻬﺎﺭ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
۹.۲
۳
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ۱۴۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۹.۲
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﯽﺩﺭﭘﯽ ۱۴۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۹.۲
۱۴۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺧﻂ ﺟﺪﺍﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﯽﺩﺭﭘﯽ
۱۴۹
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ
۱.۳
ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ۱۵۰ . . . . . . . . . .
ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ِ
۲.۳
ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۱۵۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۳
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎ ۱۵۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۳
ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ
۵.۳
۱۵۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۴.۳
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ ۱۵۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۴.۳
ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﯾﺲ ۱۵۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۴.۳
ﺭﯾﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﮑﺎﻝ ۱۵۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۴.۳
ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻭﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺩﻭﺩﻭﯾﯽ
۱۵۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۴.۳
ﮐﺴﺮﻫﺎ ۱۶۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۶.۴.۳
ﮐﺴﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪﺩﺍﺭ ۱۶۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷.۴.۳
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ mﺷﯽﺀ ﺍﺯ nﺷﯽﺀ ۱۶۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۸.۴.۳
ﮐﺴﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﻢ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ۱۶۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۹.۴.۳
ﻣﺎﺗﺮﯾﺲﻫﺎ ۱۶۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۰.۴.۳
ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ ۱۶۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۱.۴.۳
ﻧﻘﻄﻪﻫﺎ ۱۷۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۲.۴.۳
ﺩﯾﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ۱۷۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۳.۴.۳
ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝ ۱۷۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۴.۴.۳
ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﭼﻨﺪﺿﺎﺑﻄﻪﺍﯼ ۱۷۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۵.۴.۳
ﺟﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۱۷۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻫﻢ ۱۷۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﭘﻨﺞ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
۶.۳
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ۱۸۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷.۳
ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ۱۸۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۸.۳
۹.۳
۱.۷.۳
ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﺎﯼﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ۱۸۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۷.۳
۱۸۹ .
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﯾﮏ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۱۹۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۸.۳
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﯾﮏ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۱۹۰ . . . . .
۲.۸.۳
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ۱۹۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۸.۳
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ۱۹۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۱۹۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۹.۳
ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﺎﺩﻩ ۲۰۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۹.۳
ﻗﻠﻢ ﺳﯿﺎﻩ ۲۰۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۹.۳
ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۲۰۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۰.۳ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ۲۰۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۱.۳ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻫﯽ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ۲۰۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱۲.۳ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪﺧﻄﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻫﯽ ۲۱۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۱۲.۳
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ۲۱۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۱۲.۳
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ۲۱۱ . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۱۲.۳
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ۲۱۳ . . . . . . . . .
۴.۱۲.۳
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻫﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ۲۱۴ . . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۱۲.۳
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻫﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ۲۱۵ . . . . . . . . . .
۶.۱۲.۳
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ \tagﻭ ۲۱۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \notag
۱۳.۳ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۲۱۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۱۳.۳
ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ۲۱۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۱۳.۳
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ۲۲۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . multline
ﺷﺶ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
۳.۱۳.۳
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ۲۲۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . split
۴.۱۳.۳
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ۲۲۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gather
۵.۱۳.۳
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ۲۲۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . align
۱۴.۳ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ۲۲۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۱۴.۳
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ۲۲۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \newtheorem
۲.۱۴.۳
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﺼﯿﻪﻫﺎ ۲۳۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۱۴.۳
ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪ ۲۳۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۱۴.۳
ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ theorem
۲۳۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۱۴.۳
ﻣﺜﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۲۳۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . theorem
۶.۱۴.۳
ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۲۳۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amsthm
۷.۱۴.۳
ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۲۴۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amsthm
۸.۱۴.۳
ﻣﺜﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۲۴۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amsthm
۹.۱۴.۳
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ۲۴۴ . . . . . . .
۱۰.۱۴.۳ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ۲۴۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . proof
۱۱.۱۴.۳ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ ۲۴۸ . . . . . . . . . .
۱۵.۳ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ amsmathﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺁﻥ ۲۴۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ
۱.۴
۲۵۳
ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ۲۵۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۱.۴
ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ report ،bookﻭ ۲۵۴ . . . . . . . . . article
۲.۱.۴
ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ۲۵۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . letter
۳.۱.۴
ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ۲۵۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . slides
۲.۴
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ۲۶۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۴
ﭼﮑﯿﺪﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ۲۶۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﻫﻔﺖ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
۴.۴
ﻓﺼﻞﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﺑﻨﺪﯼ ۲۶۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۴
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ،ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ ۲۶۷ . . . . . . . . . . . .
۶.۴
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ ۲۷۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷.۴
۵
۱.۶.۴
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ۲۷۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thebibliography
۲.۶.۴
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ BibTEXﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪﺍﯼ ۲۷۴ . . . . . . . .
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪﺳﺎﺯﯼ ۲۸۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ
۱.۵
۲۹۳
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ۲۹۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \documentclass
۱.۱.۵
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ۲۹۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۱.۵
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ۲۹۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۱.۵
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ۲۹۶ . . . . . .
۴.۱.۵
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﯾﮑﺮ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ۲۹۷ . . .
۵.۱.۵
ﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ۲۹۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﺁﻏﺎﺯﯾﻦِ ﻓﺼ ِ
۶.۱.۵
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ۲۹۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷.۱.۵
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۲۹۹ . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۵
ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۳۰۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۵
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ۳۰۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۵
ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۳۰۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . geometry
۱.۴.۵
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۳۰۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . geometry
۲.۴.۵
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ۳۰۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۴.۵
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ۳۰۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۴.۵
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ۳۰۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۴.۵
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ۳۱۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﻫﺸﺖ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
۶.۴.۵
۵.۵
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ۳۱۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۶.۵
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۳۱۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fancyhdr
۷.۵
۶
ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ۳۱۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۶.۵
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏﺭ ﻭ ۳۱۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۶.۵
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ۳۱۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۶.۵
ﻒ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ۳۲۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺗﻌﺮﯾ ِ
۴.۶.۵
ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ۳۲۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fancy
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ۳۲۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳۲۹
ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ
۱.۶
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ۳۲۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۶
ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ۳۳۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۶
ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۳۳۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . graphicx
۴.۶
۵.۶
۱.۳.۶
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ۳۳۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \includegraphics
۲.۳.۶
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﭘﻬﻨﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ
۳۳۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۳.۶
ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ۳۳۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۳.۶
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ۳۳۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۳.۶
ﺑﺮﺵ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ۳۴۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۶.۳.۶
ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻫﻢﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﭘﻬﻨﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ ۳۴۱ . . . . . .
ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ۳۴۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۴.۶
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \scaleboxﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ۳۴۵ . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۴.۶
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \resizeboxﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ۳۴۶ . . . . . . . .
۳.۴.۶
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \rotateboxﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ۳۴۷ . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ۳۵۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
www.rasekhoon.net/software
ﻧﻪ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
۷
۶.۶
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ minipageﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯼﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ۳۵۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۷.۶
ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ۳۵۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \includegraphics
۳۵۹
ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ
۱.۷
ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ۳۵۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۷
ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ۳۶۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۲.۷
ﺷﮑﻞ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ۳۶۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۲.۲.۷
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ۳۶۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۲.۷
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ۳۶۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۷
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۳۶۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . float
۴.۷
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺯﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲﻫﺎ ۳۷۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۱.۴.۷
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ۳۷۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . caption
۲.۴.۷
ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺯﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲ ۳۷۶ . . . . . . . . . .
۳.۴.۷
ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ۳۷۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۴.۴.۷
ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ۳۸۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
۵.۴.۷
ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ۳۸۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺍﻟﻒ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ
۳۸۳
ﺍﻟﻒ ۱.ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ۳۸۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺍﻟﻒ ۲.ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ۳۹۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺏ
ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ LaTEX
۳۹۳
ﺏ۱.
ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ۳۹۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MiKTEX
ﺏ۲.
ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ۳۹۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MiKTEX
ﺏ۳.
ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻤﺒﻮﺩ ۳۹۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ﺩﻩ
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ
ﮐﺘﺎﺏﻧﺎﻣﻪ
۳۹۹
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ
۴۰۵
ﻓﺼﻞ ۱
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ LaTEXﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﻔﺎﻫﯿﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺎ ِ
LaTEXﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺁ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ
LaTEXﺑﻪﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﯽﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪﯼ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﻮﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ
ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ.
۱.۱
ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ
ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ،ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺨﻪﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ
ﻣﯽﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﯾﺎﻓﺖ .ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ،ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩ .ﻣﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ
ﺣﺘﯽ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﺸﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ
ﺟﻠﺪ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ،ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺷﮕﻔﺖﺁﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺴﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﯿﺰ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﻮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ
ﺗﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ،ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۴۴۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ،ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ.
ﺗﮑﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ.
۱
۲
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ،ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ۱۴۵۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﻨﺪﻩﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ ﻭ
ﺳﭙﺲ ،ﺑﺎ ﺭﯾﺨﺘﻦ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻣﺬﺍﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻨﺪﻩﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ .ﺳﭙﺲ
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ
ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﯾﺪ .ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ
ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺑﺮﮒ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ،ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ،
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ ،ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ.
ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻋﺶ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺍﯼ ﻧﺒﺮﺩ .ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﯾﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻏﺮﺿﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ
ﮐﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﯾﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺭﺳﯿﺪ .ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۴۵۴ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ،ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ،ﺑﺎ
ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﯿﻞ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ،ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﯿﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ.
ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﯿﺖ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﻣﺪ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺮﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﻫﻪﻫﺎ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ
ﺷﮕﻔﺖﺍﻧﮕﯿﺰﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺍﺭ ﻭﭘﺎ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ .ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ ،ﻫﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ
ﺩﻭﯾﺴﺖ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﺭ ﻭﭘﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﺨﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ .ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ
ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﯿﺰﯼ ﭘﻮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ ،ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ۱۸۷۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ
ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ ﻧﻮﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ .ﻧﯿﺮ ﻭﯼ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ
ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﯽ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪ .ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ،
ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ۸۵ﺩﺭﺻﺪﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ،ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ،ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ۱۹۶۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ
ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۹۶۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ﺟﻬﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ
ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﻮﺩ .ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ،ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ،
TEX ۲.۱ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
۳
ﺗﺼﻮ ﯾﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ،ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ .ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﯾﮏ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺎﯾﻊ ﺷﯿﻤﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻏﻮﻃﻪﻭﺭ
ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ .ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ،ﺑﺮﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ
ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﯾﻊ ﺷﯿﻤﯿﺎﯾﯽ ،ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎً ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ
ﻣﯽﺁﻣﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ،ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ .ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ
ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﻮﺩﻧﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ
ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻣﺬﺍﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﺪ.
ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﯾﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭ ﻭﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ،ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ
ﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻫﻢ ﭼﺎﭖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ.
ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ،ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ۱۹۷۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ
ﺩﺭ ﺩﻫﻪﯼ ۱۹۷۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺸﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ
ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯿﻠﯿﻮﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﻻﺭ ﻫﺰ ﯾﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻪ
ﺳﺨﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﺍﺧﺮ ﺩﻫﻪﯼ ۱۹۸۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ﻣﺠﻠﻪﯼ Timeﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﮑﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﻭ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺲ ،ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ QuarkXpressﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ
ﺭ ﻭﻣﯿﺰﯼ Macintashﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ .ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﻗﻮ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺵﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ،ﺭ ﻭﺯﻫﺎ
ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍ ﻣﯽﮐﺸﯿﺪ ،ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ.
۲.۱
TEXﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﯽ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺶ ،ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﻮﺩ،
ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ .ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎ ،ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ،
ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ،ﺑﺎ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ،ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ
ﻣﺘﻦ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮔﺸﺖ.
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۴
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺏ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ،ﮐﺘﺎ ِ
ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰ ﻭﻡ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ
ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﯽﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ .ﻫﯿﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻮﻭﻝ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ
ٔ
ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ.
ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ،ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ،ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺮﯾﻤﻪ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﻨﺎﻥ ﭼﺎﭘﺨﺎﻧﻪ،
ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﻣﺪ؛ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﺮﯾﻤﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪﺳﺨﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺭﺍ
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩ ،ﻫﻤﮑﺎﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽﺩﺍﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ،ﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ ،ﺩﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ TEXﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۹۸۲ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﻧﺎﻟﺪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ،۱ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﻮﺭﺩ ،۲ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ
ﺷﺪ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ TEXﺭﯾﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۹۶۹ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ،ﺟﻠﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ
ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
The Art of Computer Programming
ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﻧﺎﻟﺪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ،ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺎﻩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ،ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﻭ
ﺑﺎ ﺷﯿﻮﻩﯼ ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﻥ ۱۹ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ،ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪ .ﺍﻣﺎ
ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﺪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ،ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۹۷۶ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ،ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭﯼ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ
ﺑﺎ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ۳ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ ،ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﺪ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭ ﭼﺎﭖ
ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ،ﺑﻪﺩﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺭﺳﯿﺪ ،ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﻭﯼ ﻧﺎﭘﺴﻨﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﺭ ﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ
ﻋﻼﻗﻪﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ،ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﭘﺪﯾﺪ
ﺁﻭﺭﺩ .ﻭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﻪ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۹۷۷ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ،ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ،
ﮐﻪ ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ TEXﻭ METAFONTﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ] [۱۷] ،[۱۶] ،[۱۵ﻭ ].[۱۸
1 Donald Knuth
2 Stanford University
3 Fonts
۵
TEX ۲.۱ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ TEXﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﻭﻡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ The Art of Computer
Programmingﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﯼ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ،ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦﻫﺎﯼ
ﺏ ،[۱۵] ،TEX
ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭ ﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺘﺎ ِ
ﻣﯽﻧﻮﯾﺴﺪ:
TEXﯾﮏ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻭ ﯾﮋﻩ
ﮐﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ ﻭ
ﻣﺎﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ ،ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ . . .
،TEXﺁﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۹۸۲ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ
ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ۱۹۸۹ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ ،ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ۸ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ
ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺯ ﻭﺩ TEXﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻣﻊ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﻭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻭ ﭘﮋﻭﻫﺸﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ
ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﺭ ﻭﺍﺝ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ ،ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ
ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺮ ،ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ،ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ ،ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ
ﻭ ﻣﺎﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ ،ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ ،ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ TEXﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ،ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ.
ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻣﺪﯼ ،TEXﺑﻪﻭ ﯾﮋﻩ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎﯼ
ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ
ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻪﺯﯾﺒﺎﯾﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ TEX .ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﺣﻤﻞﭘﺬﯾﺮﯼ ۴ﺑﺎﻻﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ
ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ TEXﺑﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩﯼ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻭﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ
ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ،ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯿﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ
ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﻭ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ TEXﯾﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ
ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﯿﺴﺖ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺶ ،ﮔﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻞ ۵ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺘﺎﺏِ ] [۲۰ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ:
4 Portability
5 Gordon Bell
۶
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
TEXﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻥ
ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ TEX .ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ
ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﺍﺳﺖ . . .
ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺩﻫﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﺷﺪﻥ ،TEXﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ TEXﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ
ﭘﺎﯾﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺳﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ ] .[۲۱ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻫﻢ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻫﺎﺕ
ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ TEXﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ TEXﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒ ًﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
۳.۱
LaTEXﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﺁﻏﺎﺯﯾﻦ ﺩﻫﻪﯼ ۱۹۸۰ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ،ﻟﺰﻟﯽ ﻟﻤﭙﺎﺭﺕ ۶ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﯼ LaTEXﮐﺮﺩ.
LaTEXﯾﮏ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ TEXﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ TEXﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ LaTEXﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪﯼ
TEXﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻭﯼ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ،ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺍﺯ
ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽﻫﺎﯼ TEXﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ TEXﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ LaTEXﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ،ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ
ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ،ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﮐﻪ ،LaTEXﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ TEXﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ:
ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖِ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ،ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ۷ ،ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ ،ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ۸ ،
ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ. . . ،
ﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ،ﺭ ﻭﯼ
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ،LaTEXﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟ ِ
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
6 Lesli Lampart
7 Cross reference
8 Index
۷
LaTEX ۳.۱ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
۱.۳.۱
ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ،ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ
ٔ
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ،ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺸﺎﺭ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺳﺖﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﯾﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ
ٔ
ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ۹ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﺗﺼﻤﯿﻢ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ِ
ٔ
ﻧﻈﺮ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎ ،ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ،ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒﻫﺎ ،ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ،ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻭ
ِ
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﻮﻭﻝ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ ،ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ
ٔ
ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ LaTEXﻧﻘﺶ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﻔﺎ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ TEXﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻮﻭﻝ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ٔ
ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﻣﺎ ،ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺻﻮﺭﺕ LaTEX ،ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ
ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ
ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﯾﻢ ،ﺑﻪ LaTEXﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﮐﻨﺪ.
۲.۳.۱
ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ LaTEXﺭﺍ ،ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ،ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ
ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ،ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ:
}\documentclass{article
}\begin{document
This is my \emph{first} document prepared
in \LaTeX.
}\end{document
ﺩﺭ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ backslashﮔﻮﯾﻨﺪ ،ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ،/ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ
ﺁﻥ forward slashﮔﻮﯾﻨﺪ ،ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ myfile.texﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ،ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ LaTEXﻣﯽﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ .ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ
texﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﺩﯾﺪﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ
۹ﻧﺎﺷﺮ
۸
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ،ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ
ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺩﺭ Microsoft Windowsﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Command Promptﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ
myfile.texﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ:
working-folder > latex myfile
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ،ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ:
working-folder > yap myfile
ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ
ﺍﺳﺖ۱۰ .
This is my first document prepared in LATEX.
ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،LaTEXﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ،ﻧﻘﺶ ﯾﮏ ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ LaTEX
ﺍﯾﻔﺎ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﻨﺪ .ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ،ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺩﺭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻌﺮ ﻭﻑ WinEdtﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺑﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪﯼ LaTEXﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﺩﯾﺪﻥ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪﯼ DVIﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ.
۳.۳.۱
ﯼ LaTEX
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩ ِ
a
ﯽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺷﺪ ،ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ L TEXﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨ ِ
ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ .ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ LaTEXﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻗﯿﻖﺗﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺧﻂ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ
ﺍ ﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎ ِ
} ،\documentclass{atricleﺑﻪ LaTEXﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ
} \documentclass{bookﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ } \begin{documentﻭ }\end{document
ﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎ ِ
ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ،ﻣﻘﺎﯾﺴﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﺳﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ ،ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ
۱۰ﻗﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺟﺰ ﻭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ.
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۹
LaTEX ۳.۱ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
ﻞ } \emph{firstﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ
ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﺣﺎﺻ ِ
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ firstﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ \emph .ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ۱۱ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ }\emph{htext i
ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ،htext iﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \emph
ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗٔﺎﮐﯿﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺳﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ،ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ \LaTeXﺩﺭ
ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﭼﺎﭖِ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ LaTEXﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﯾﻦ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﻢ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ \LaTeXﺑﻪ \latexﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ LaTEXﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ
undefined control sequence
ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶِ ،۱.۶.۱ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ،ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ.
ﺕ Today is \todayﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ،ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻣﺠﺪِﺩ
ﺍ ﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭ ِ
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
۴.۳.۱
ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﯿﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ
LaTEXﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ؛ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎ ﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ
ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﻣﯽﻧﻮﯾﺴﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ
ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺰ ﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺷﮑﻞ ۱.۱ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ؛ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ LaTEX
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ۱.۱ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﯼ LaTEXﻓﻘﻂ
ﻧﻘﺶ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ cls ،texﻭ ،styﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ
ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ dviﻭ .logﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻢ
ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ LaTEXﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ LaTEXﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺁﻭﺭﺩ ،ﻭ ﻫﻢ
11 Command
۱۰
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
)user input (tex
)document class (cls
)bibliography (bbl
)packages (sty
LATEX
)fonts (fmt, tfm, fd
working files
aux idx
toc lof
log ind
)transcript files (log, lis
)TEX output (dvi
)Acrobat (pdf
Postscript (ps),
Screen,
Printer,
ﻞ :۱.۱ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﯿﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ
ﺷﮑ ِ
ﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ،
ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩ ِ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ auxﻭ .toc
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،myfile.texﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ
ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﯼ
ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ۱۲
ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ ،ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
myfile.tocﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ LaTEXﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ LaTEXﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ myfile.texﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ
ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺣﺘﯽ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ LaTEXﺗﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ
ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﯾﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯼ ۶.۴ ،۵.۴ﻭ ۷.۴ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ،ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﯼ LaTEXﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ:
texﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ،LaTEXﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
12 Working folder
۱۱
LaTEX ۳.۱ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ tex
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ LaTEXﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ
ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ.
clsﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺁﻥ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻌﯿﻨﯽ
ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ،LaTEXﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \documentclassﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ }.\documentclass{report
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻨﺞ ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ (۱ :ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
(۲ ،article.clsﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ (۳ ،report.clsﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ
ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ (۴ ،book.clsﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ letter.clsﻭ (۵ﺭﺩﻩﯼ
ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ .slides.clsﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ
ﺑﺨﺶ ۱.۴ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۲۵۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ
ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ،ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ LaTEXﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ،
ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ
amsart, amsbook, memoir, prosper, beamer
ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩ.
styﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ،LaTEXﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ styﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ
ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮﯼ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽﻫﺎﯼ LaTEX
ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ،
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ،LaTEXﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \usepackage
ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ }.\usepackage{amsmath
۱۲
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ amsmathﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭ ﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺭﺍ
ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ .ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ makeidxﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ graphicxﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ
ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺕ LaTEXﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ.
tfm, fmt, fdﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺷﮑﻞِ ﻗﻠﻢ
ِ
ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ LaTEXﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ myfile.texﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ
ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺑﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﯾﺪ.
dviﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ myfile.texﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ
myfile.dviﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ،DVIﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ Yapﺩﺭ Microsoft Windowsﻭ
xdviﺩﺭ ،Linuxﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ،ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
working-folder > dvips myfile.dvi
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ myfile.psﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ PostScriptﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ Microsoft Windowsﺗﻮﺳﻂ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ GSViewﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
logﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ myfile.texﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﺥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﯼ ﺩﯾﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ
ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ myfile.logﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ،
ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ،ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﯾﻢ ،ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ myfile.texﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻭﯼ ﺍﺯ LaTEXﭼﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ LaTEX
ﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،myfile.texﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ
LaTEXﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﺨﺺ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﺍﯼ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
LaTEX ۳.۱ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
۱۳
tocﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ،\tableofcontentsﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ LaTEX ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ tocﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ
ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ،ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﯾﺮﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ
ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ LaTEX .ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ
ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﮕﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ،ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ
ﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳ ِ
ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
lofﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ tocﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
\listoffiguresﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
lotﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ tocﻭ lofﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \listoftablesﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
idxﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ،
ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ،\makeindexﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﻫﺎﯼ
ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ idxﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ
LaTEXﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ،ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ،[۱۲] ،MakeIndexﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ idxﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ
ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ indﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ indﻗﺎﺑﻞ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﺍﺳﺖ.
indﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ،idxﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﻗﺒﻞ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ MakeIndexﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ind
ﺍﺳﺖ LaTEX .ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
auxﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۹.۱ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۶۹ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﺪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ
ﻞ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ،ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ،ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ
ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ،LaTEXﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤ ِ
ﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ،ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎ ِ
ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ،ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ،ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ aux
ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۱۴
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
۵.۳.۱
ﭼﺮﺍ LaTEX؟
ﺷﯿﻮﻩﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺷﮕﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ Microsoft Wordﻭ Corel
WordPerfectﮐﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻔﻆ WYSIWYGﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ
ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ:
What You See Is What You Get.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎ ،ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺷﺨﺼﺎً ﮐﺎﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﻭ
ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗ ٔﺎﺛﯿﺮ
ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ۱۳
ﺑﺎ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﺷﺨﺺ
ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕِﺮ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﺪ.
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ،LaTEXﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ LaTEXﺳﭙﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ
ﻞ
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ،ﺩﯾﺪ ِ
ﻥ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤ ِ
ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،LaTEXﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻫﻢﺯﻣﺎﻥ ،ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ .ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ
ﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ،ﭘﯿﺶ
ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳ ِ
ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ،ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ
ﭼﺮﺍ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﺩﺳﺮ؟ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺷﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﯾﺎ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ
ﮔﻮﻧﻪﯼ WYSIWYGﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﻢ؟
ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ،ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺳﺦﻫﺎﯼ ﺁﻥ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﮕﯿﺰﻩﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ TEXﻧﻬﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻥ TEXﺩﺳﺘﯿﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ
ﺩﻭﻧﺎﻟﺪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﻣﯽﮔﻮ ﯾﺪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ِ
ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ ﻭ
ﻣﺎﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ ،ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ
ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺷﮕﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺞ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ .ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ
ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺿﺎﯾﺖﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ LaTEX ،ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ
ﺑﻬﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ LaTEX ،ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ
ﺑﺮﻣﯽﺷﻤﺎﺭﯾﻢ:
13 Interactively
۱۵
LaTEX ۳.۱ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟
LaTEX ‐۱ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ
ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻨﺪ ،ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ٔ
‐۲ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ LaTEXﺳﭙﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ
ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ
ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺮﻑ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ.
‐۳ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ
ﺣﺮﻓﻪﺍﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
‐۴ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩﯼ ﺭ ﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ
ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻧﻮ ﯾﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺭ ﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ
ﺑﻪﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ.
‐۵ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩﺍﯼ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ،ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﯽ ،ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ،ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ،ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ
ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ.
‐۶ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ LaTEXﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ،
ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ
ﺑﻪﺭ ﻭﺯ ۱۴
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
LaTEX ‐۷ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﯿﺖ ﺣﻤﻞﭘﺬﯾﺮﯼ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻘﺮ ﯾﺒﺎً ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ
ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ
ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻞ ﭘﺮﺳ ﺶِ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺁ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽﻫﺎﯼ ،LaTEXﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺳ ﺦِ ﮐﺎﻣ ِ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺭﺳﯿﺪ.
14 Up to date
۱۶
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
۴.۱
ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ
ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
\LaTeX{} has several pre-defined styles for the layout of
typeset documents. Authors using \LaTeX{} sometimes
wish to understand how these layouts are parameterized.
The layouts package enables the display of certain of these parameterized
layouts, showing what the parameters control.
LATEX has several pre-defined styles for the layout of typeset documents. Authors
using LATEX sometimes wish to understand how these layouts are parameterized. The
layouts package enables the display of certain of these parameterized layouts, showing
what the parameters control.
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞِ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ
ﻞ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﻤﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻃﻮﻝ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ
ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ
ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
LaTEXﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ TABﻭ BLANKﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ
ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ
ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ،ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ENTERﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﻌﺒﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ
ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ،ﺑﯿﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮ ﯾﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،LaTEXﻣﺸﺨﺺﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ
ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﻢﺍﺭ ﺯ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ.
It does not matter wether you enter one
or several spaces after a word.
An empty line, or more, starts a new
paragraph.
It does not matter wether you
enter one or several
spaces
after a word.
An empty line, or more, starts
a new paragraph.
ﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﯼ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ ،ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻓﻀﺎ ِ
ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﻪﯼ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ،ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ ،ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ
۱۷
۴.۱ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ
ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ LaTEX .ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﭘﯿﺮ ﻭﯼ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺍﻣﺎ LaTEXﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ؟
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ،ﺍﮔﺮ LaTEXﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ
!
ﮐﻪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ
ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ۱۵
?
.
ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ ،ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ
ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻪﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ
ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ
ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﯽﺁﯾﺪ .ﺍﻣﺎ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ
ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ:
Carrots are good for your eyes, since they contain Vitamin A. Have
?you ever seen a rabbit wearing glasses
Carrots are good for your eyes, since they contain Vitamin A. Have you ever seen a
?rabbit wearing glasses
ﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﻣﺎ LaTEXﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ
ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ” “Aﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎ ِ
ﺁﻥ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ
ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ @\ ،ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ @\ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ،
ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ LaTEXﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥِ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﺩ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﯾﺴﻪ
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺁﯾﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ،ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ،ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Carrots are good for your eyes, since they contain Vitamin A\@. Have
?you ever seen a rabbit wearing glasses
Carrots are good for your eyes, since they contain Vitamin A. Have you ever seen a
?rabbit wearing glasses
ﻑ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ،ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﻫﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ
ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮ ِ
ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ:
۱۵ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ a,b,. . . ,z
۱۸
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
The numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. are called natural numbers. According
to Kroncker, they were made by God; all else being the work of man.
The numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. are called natural numbers. According to Kroncker, they
were made by God; all else being the work of man.
LaTEXﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ” “etc.ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ
ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ
ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ،ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ” “etc.ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ.
The numbers 1, 2, 3 etc.\ are called natural numbers. According
to Kroncker, they were made by God; all else being the work of man.
The numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. are called natural numbers. According to Kroncker, they
were made by God; all else being the work of man.
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ
ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
ﯾﮑﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ،ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺮﺍ ﮐﺘﺮ ~ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ
ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ~ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ~ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ
ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ Zorn Lemmaﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ
ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ Zornﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ Lemmaﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ،ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻥ
ﭘﺴﻨﺪﯾﺪﻩ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ Zorn Lemmaﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ Zorn~Lemma
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺿﻤﻦ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ Zornﻭ ،Lemmaﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ
ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ Zorn Lemmaﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺪﯾﺪﺁﻭﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﺑﺨﺶ ۲.۲ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۸۳
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ LaTEXﺑﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ .ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ:
I think LATEXis fun.
I think \LaTeX is fun.
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۱۹
۵.۱ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ
ﭼﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ \LaTeXﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ LaTEXﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ
ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻌﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ! ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﯽ LaTEXﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ
ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﯾﺎﺑﺪ ،ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ \ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ.
I think LATEX is fun.
I think \LaTeX\ is fun.
ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ
ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﯾﺎﺑﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﯼ }{ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺮﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ.
I think LATEX is fun.
I think \LaTeX{} is fun.
ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۲.۲ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
۵.۱
ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ
ﻥ
ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪ ِ
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﺸﯿﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺷﺪ ،ﺣﺎﺻﻞ \LaTeXﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ
ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ \ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ،
ﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎ ِ
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ \ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ LaTEXﺍﻋﻼﻥ
ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ \ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ،ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ
ِ
ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿ
ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ
ﻢ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ
ِ
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ .ﭘﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ”\“ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﻢ ،ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \textbackslashﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ۳ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭ ﯾﺎﺿﯽ،
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ”\“ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \backslashﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ:
The command \verb|\textbackslash| produces ‘‘\textbackslash’’. Maybe,
I have now learnt about 1% of \LaTeX.
The command \textbackslash produces “\”. Maybe, I have now learnt about 1
۲۰
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﯿﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ 1ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ LaTEXﻋﻼﻣﺖ %ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺲ
ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ %ﺑﻪ LaTEXﺍﻋﻼﻥ
ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ %ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ
ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ۱۶
ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ.
ﻥ LaTEXﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭ ﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ
ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮ ﯾﺴﺎ ِ
ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺑﺮﻧﺪ.
ﺩﯾﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ
ﭘﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ” “%ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ \%ﻭﺍﺭﺩ
ﮐﻨﯿﻢ:
Maybe, I have now learnt about 1\% of \LaTeX.
Maybe, I have now learnt about 1% of LATEX.
ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯼ \ ﻭ %ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣ ﺖِ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ
ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ
}
{
\
_
&
~
%
$
#
^
ﺍﯾﻦﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ LaTEXﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ
ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ،ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ
ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ،ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝِ ۱.۱ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻻﺯﻡ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ
ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ،ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ~ ﻭ ^ ﻭ \ ،ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ،ﺩﺭﺳﺖ
ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ~\ ﻭ ^\ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻒ۱۸.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۳۹۱ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ \\ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
This is the first line.
This is the second line.
This is the first
line.\\ This is the second line.
16 Comments
۲۱
۵.۱ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ
Input
Output
Character
ˆ
\textasciicircum
^
#
\#
#
$
\$
$
%
\%
%
˜
\textasciitilde
~
&
&\
&
_\
_
\
\textbackslash
\
{
{\
{
}
}\
}
ﺟﺪﻭﻝِ :۱.۱ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ
ﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻤﮏ
ﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧ ِ
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﯼ \\ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧ ِ
ﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ] \\[hheight iﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ hheight iﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ
ﮔﺮﻓﺖ .ﺻﻮﺭ ِ
ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩhheight i .
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ،LaTEXﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ cmﯾﺎ ptﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ،
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۶.۶.۱ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۴.۱ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ،۴۴ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ
hheight iﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ hheight iﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ hheight iﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ hheight iﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ \baselineskip
ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ
ﺣﻤﻞﭘﺬﯾﺮﯼ ۱۷
ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
17 Portability
۲۲
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
This is the first line.
This is the second line.
This is the third line.
This is the last line.
\\This is the first line.
]This is the second line.\\[10pt
This is the third
]line.\\[-.3\baselineskip
This is the last line.
ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \\ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱.۱.۲ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ،
ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻃﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ،ﺑﺨﺶ ۶.۶.۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
۶.۱
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ LaTEXﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ،ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ ،ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ،
ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ .ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ،ﻣﯽﺁﻣﻮﺯﯾﻢ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ
ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩ.
۱.۶.۱
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ
ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ \emph{first} ،\tableofcontents
ﻭ &\ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺑﻪ LaTEXﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
\tableofcontentsﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ،ﺩﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻫﯿﭻ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ
ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻞﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ،\tableofcontentsﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ،
ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯼ ۴.۴ﻭ ۵.۴ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ LaTEXﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ،ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ
ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \LaTeXﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ LaTEX
ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \latexﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ
ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ LaTEXﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
۲۳
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ،LaTEXﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ،ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ:
• ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺸﮑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ
ﻣﯽﯾﺎﺑﺪ۱۸ .
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ،ﯾﮏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍ ﮐﺘﺮ ﻏﯿﺮﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ،
ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ \bfseriesﻭ }.\emph{first
• ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ &\ ﻭ \\.
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ:
‐۱ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﮏﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ
\bfseriesﻭ .\itshapeﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ
ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻏﯿﺮﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ
ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ:
\bfseries Thanks to Aunt Mabel for all her help.
\bfseries{}Thanks to Aunt Mabel for all her help.
\bfseries
Thanks to Aunt Mabel for all her help.
ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ LaTEXﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ
ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ،ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ
ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻏﯿﺮﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ ،ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ
ﻥ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ،ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﯼ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ
}{ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺮﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ
ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﻨﺪ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ.
LATEXis fun. LATEX is fun. LATEX is fun.
\LaTeX is fun.
\LaTeX{} is fun. \LaTeX\ is fun.
‐۲ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ .ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ
ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
۱۸ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ،ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } {a,A,b,B,...,z,Zﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۲۴
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
}\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article
}\usepackage[leqno]{amsmath
}\usepackage{pstricks,graphicx
}\begin{document
}\chapter{Banach Algebras} \label{Banach-Algebras
A \textbf{Banach Algebra} is ...
}\end{document
ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ] [ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ
} { ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ:
ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ
ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﯼ۱۹ .
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ } \vspace{1cmﯾﺎ } .\usepackage{amsmathﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ
ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ LaTEX
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺏ( ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ
ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ۲۰ .
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ] [ ﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ
ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ } { ﻗﺮﺍﺭ
ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ
ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ } \documentclass[12pt,twocolumn]{bookﯾﺎ
} \usepackage[leqno]{amsmathﻭ ﯾﺎ ].\\[2cm
۲.۶.۱
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻫﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ،ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ
ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﯽﺧﺒﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ
ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ،ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ LaTEXﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ .ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ
ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
19 Mandatory argument
20 Optional argument
۲۵
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﯿﻢ .ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩﺍﯼ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ
LaTEXﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ
ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ،ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﺵ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ” “if and only ifﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ
ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻭﯼ ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ
ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ،ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ.
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ \newcommandﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
}\newcommand{\Iff}{if and only if
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ \Iffﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ،ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ
ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ.
ﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ
‐۱ﻧﺎﻡِ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ
ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
‐۲ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ LaTEX
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻧﺨﺴﺘﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪﻧﻈﺮ
ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ ،ﻧﺎﻡ \iffﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﺴٔﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \iffﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ
ِ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ \Iffﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ
ﺑﺮﮔﺰﯾﺪﻩﺍﯾﻢ.
‐۳ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
LaTEXﻣﻌﻨﯽﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ .ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ،ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ،ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﯾﺎ
ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ } \begin{henv-namei} ... \end{henv-nameiﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ
ﺑﺨﺶ ۸.۱ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۶۷ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
‐۴ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ،
ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﯾﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
\documentclassﻭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } ،\begin{documentﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
۲۶
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﯾﻢ .ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺯﯾﻦ ﭘﺲ ،ﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ
ﻥ \Iffﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ،if and only ifﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ
}\newcommand{\Iff}{if and only if
A function $f:X\to Y$ is continuous \Iff{} $f^{-1}(U)$ is open in $X$,
for every open set $U\subset Y$.
A function f : X → Y is continuous if and only if f −1 (U ) is open in X, for every
open set U ⊂ Y .
ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ \Iffﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ
ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۴.۱ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ LaTEXﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﯿﺮﺩ ،ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ
ﺭﺷﺘﻪﯼ }{ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﯾﻢ.
ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ .xspace
ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﮏ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﮐﻪ LaTEXﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ
ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺁﺯﺍﺭﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ LaTEXﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ
،[۹] ،xspaceﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺑﻪﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ xspaceﺭﺍ
ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \usepackage{xspaceﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒِ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥِ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ
\xspaceﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
}% in preamble: \usepackage{xspace
}\newcommand{\USA}{United States of America\xspace
}\newcommand{\GB}{Great Britain\xspace
The \USA has 50 states. The \USA, \GB and Canada have close cultural links.
The United States of America has 50 states. The United States of America, Great
Britain and Canada have close cultural links.
ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﯾﻢ.
ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ) (x۱ , x۲ , . . . , xnﻧﯿﺰ ،ﺑﻪﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ،ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﯾﮏ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ
ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ $(x_1,x_2,\ldots,x_n)$ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ
۲۷
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ،ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ،ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ:
}\newcommand{\vect}{$(x_1,x_2,\ldots,x_n)$
ﺕ ) (x۱ , x۲ , . . . , xnﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ
ﻥ \vectﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﻋﺒﺎﺭ ِ
ﺑﺪﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ِ
ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
}\newcommand{\vect}{$(x_1,x_2,\ldots,x_n)$
We often write $x$ to denote \vect.
We often write x to denote (x1 , x2 , . . . , xn ).
ﺣﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ) (y۱ , y۲ , . . . , ynﻭ ) (z۱ , z۲ , . . . , znﻧﯿﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ
ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ ،ﺁﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩ؟ ﺍﯾﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ،ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \vectﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ:
}\newcommand{\vect}[1]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_n)$
ﻋﺪﺩ 1ﺩﺭ ] [1ﺑﯿﺎﻥﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \vectﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﻥ #1ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
ﻣﮑﺎ ِ
}}\newcommand{\R}{\mathbb{R
}\newcommand{\vect}[1]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_n)$
Let \vect{x} and \vect{y} be elements of $\R^n$. Then \ldots
Let (x1 , x2 , . . . , xn ) and (y1 , y2 , . . . , yn ) be elements of Rn . Then . . .
ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ) ،(x۱ , x۲ , . . . , xn
) (y۱ , y۲ , . . . , ynﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ،ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ) (x۱ , x۲ , . . . , xmﻭ ) (y۱ , y۲ , . . . , ypﻫﻢ
ﻫﺴﺖ .ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \vectﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑﺮ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ:
}\newcommand{\vect}[2]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_#2)$
ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \vectﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺩﻭ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ } \vect{harg1 i}{harg2 iﺍﺳﺖ؛
ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ harg1 iﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ #1ﻭ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ harg2 iﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ #2ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
۲۸
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
}\newcommand{\vect}[2]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_#2)$
Two vectors \vect{x}{m} and \vect{y}{n} are equal if and only if $n=m$ and
$x_i=y_i$ for $1\leq i\leq n$.
Two vectors (x1 , x2 , . . . , xm ) and (y1 , y2 , . . . , yn ) are equal if and only if n = m and
xi = yi for 1 ≤ i ≤ n.
ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ \newcommandﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ۹ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ
ﮐﺮﺩ.
ﺗ ﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧ ﺘ ﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
\newcommandﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
}\newcommand{hnew-com-namei}[hnumber i][hdefaulti]{hdefinitioni
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hnew-com-nameiﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ hnumber iﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﯼ
} {۱, ۲, . . . , ۹ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻋﺪﺩ hnumber iﻣﺸﺨﺺﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ
ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰ ﯾﻨﻪﯼ hdefault iﻫﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰ ﯾﻨﻪﯼ hdefault iﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ،
LaTEXﻧﺨﺴﺘﯿﻦ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ
ﺍ ﮔﺮ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ LaTEX ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ
ﭘﺒﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ hdefault iﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ ،ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ،ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ hdefault i
ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﻌﻨﯽﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ hnumber iﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
}\newcommand{\vect}[1][x]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_n)$
\vect \qquad \vect[y] \qquad \vect[z] \par
}\renewcommand{\vect}[2][x]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_#2)$
}\vect{n} \qquad \vect[y]{m} \qquad \vect[z]{p
) (z1 , z2 , . . . , zn
) (z1 , z2 , . . . , zp
) (y1 , y2 , . . . , yn
) (y1 , y2 , . . . , ym
) (x1 , x2 , . . . , xn
) (x1 , x2 , . . . , xn
۲۹
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ .\renewcommand
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ
\renewcommandﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
}\renewcommand{hold-com-namei}[hnumber i][hdefaulti]{hdefinitioni
ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﯿﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \newcommandﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺰ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hold-com-nameiﻧﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ \vectﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ
ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ
ﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ
ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ۶.۳ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۸۴ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
۳.۶.۱
ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﯽ
ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻨﺪ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ } \textit{htext iﮐﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ italicﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ِ
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ LaTEXﺭ ﻭﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ،
ﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ،ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﭘﺴﻨﺪﯾﺪﻩ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ،ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ،
ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻣﯽﮐﺎﻫﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ؛ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺸﮑﻼﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ ،ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ
ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦﺭ ﻭ ،ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ۲۱
ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
} \begin{henv-nameiﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \end{henv-nameiﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﯾﺎﺑﺪ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ
henv-nameiﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ } {a,A,b,B,. . . ,z,Zﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \textit{htext iﺑﺎﻋﺚ
ﻂ itshapeﺑﻪﺷﮑﻞ
ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﻠﻢ italicﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﻣﺤﯿ ِ
21 Environment
۳۰
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
}\begin{itshape
htext i
}\end{itshape
ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﻠﻢ italicﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﯾﮏ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﯼ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \textitﻭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ htext i
ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ itshapeﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ.
ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ،LaTEXﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﻭ ﻣﯽﺷﻮ ﯾﻢ ،ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮ ﯾﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽﺗﺮ ﯾﻦ
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩﺭ ،LaTEXﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ documentﺍﺳﺖ .ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ
ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ،documentﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \begin{documentﻭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
} ،\end{documentﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \end{documentﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEX
ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \begin{documentﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ LaTEX
ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ
}Missing \begin{document
ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ
ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
document
itemize
table
displaymath
flushright
quote
verse
description
flushleft
quotation
verbatim
center
figure
minipage
titlepage
array
equation
math
thebibliography
abstract
enumerate
letter
tabular
ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﯼ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ.
abstractﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ articleﻭ reportﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ
ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﭼﮑﯿﺪﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ؛ ﺑﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ
ﮐﻪ ﭼﮑﯿﺪﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ abstractﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۳.۴ﺩﺭ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۲۶۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
arrayﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
۳۱
ﺩﺭ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺸﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﯾﺲﻫﺎ
ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ arrayﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۹.۴.۳ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۶۵ﺭﺍ
ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
centerﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺳﻂﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ centerﺟﺎﯼ
ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ
ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱.۴.۲ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۹۳ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
descriptionﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ
ﺑﺨﺶ ۳.۵.۲ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۱۷ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ
displaymathﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ِ
ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱.۳ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۵۰ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
documentﺍﺻﻠﯽﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ documentﻗﺮﺍﺭ
ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
enumerateﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ
ﺑﺨﺶ ۲.۵.۲ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۱۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
equationﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ،ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ
ﺳﻮﯼ LaTEXﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱۰.۳ﺩﺭ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۲۰۵ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
figureﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ
LaTEXﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺼﻞ ۷ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
flushleftﻭ flushrightﻣﺤﯿﻂ flushleftﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ flushrightﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ
ﺑﺨﺶ ۲.۴.۲ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۹۴ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
itemizeﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻪﻫﻢﺭﯾﺨﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ
ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱.۵.۲ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۰۶ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
۳۲
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
letterﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ letterﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ
ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۲.۱.۴ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۲۵۵ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
mathﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱.۳ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۵۰ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
minipageﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ
ﺑﺨﺶ ۸.۶.۱ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۴۹ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
quotationﻭ quoteﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ِ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۳.۴.۲ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۹۶
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
tableﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ
LaTEXﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺼﻞ ۷ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
tabularﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۶.۲ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۱۸
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
thebibliographyﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ
ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱.۶.۴ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۲۷۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
verbatimﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ
ﻟﻔﻆ ۲۲
ﻦ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ
ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ؛ ﺑﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘ ِ
ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ،verbatimﻋﯿﻨ ﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺭ
ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱۱.۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
verseﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﻌﺮ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ۴.۴.۲ﺩﺭ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۰۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
22 Verbatim
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۳۳
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
۴.۶.۱
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ
ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ،ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ
ﻧﮑﻨﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﭘﯿﺶﺑﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ
ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \newenvironmentﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
\newenvironment{hnew-env-namei}[hnumber i][hdefaulti]%
}{hbegin-def i
}{hend-def i
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hnew-env-nameiﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﻣﯽﮔﺰﯾﻨﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ
ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ } {a,A,b,B,. . . ,z,Zﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ،
ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ parboxﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ
ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \parboxﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ LaTEX
ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ
Command \parbox already defined
ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
hnumber iﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﯼ } {۱, ۲, . . . , ۹ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ
ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ hnumber iﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻧﯽ
ﻧﻤﯽﭘﺬﯾﺮﺩ.
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰ ﯾﻨﻪﯼ hdefault iﻫﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰ ﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ LaTEX
ﻧﺨﺴﺘﯿﻦ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ،ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ،ﮔﺰ ﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩLaTEX ،
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ hdefault iﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ
ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ hdefault iﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﻌﻨﯽﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ hnumber iﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
۳۴
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ hbegin-def iﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ LaTEXﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ
hend-def iﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ LaTEXﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ hbegin-def iﻭ
hend-def iﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ
ﺶ ﺭ ﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿ ِ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ .۱
ﻂ hold-nameiﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ
ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻣﺤﯿ ِ
ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ،ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﯾﻠﯽ ،ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ hnew-nameiﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ
ِ
ﺑﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ hnew-nameiﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ hold-nameiﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩ.
}}\newenvironment{hnew-namei}{\begin{hold-namei}}{\end{hold-namei
ﻂ hnew-nameiﻫﻢﺍﺭ ﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ hold-nameiﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﺤﯿ ِ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ .۲
ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ۲.۱ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ itabstractﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﭼﮑﯿﺪﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻠﻢ italicﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ِ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ .۳
ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ۳.۱ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ namedthmﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ
ِ
ﻥ * \newtheoremﺳﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﻪﺍﯾﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ،ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ،
ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ
ﺑﺨﺶ ۲۰.۳ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۲۲۹ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ .ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ namedthmﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ
ﯾﮏ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ
ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ،ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ Theoremﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ .\renewenvironmentﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ،ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ
ِ
ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ .ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ،ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﯾﻠﯽ ،ﻧﯿﺎﺯ
۳۵
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ۶.۱
\newenvironment{itabstract}%
{\begin{center} \textsc{Abstract} \end{center} \begin{quote} \itshape}
{\end{quote}}
\begin{itabstract}
We consider when certain Banach sequence algebras $A$ on the set $N$ are
approximately amenable. Some general results are obtained, and we resolve
the special cases where $A = \ell^p$ for $1\leq p < \infty$.
\end{itabstract}
\section{Introduction}
The concept of amenability for a Banach algebra $A$,
introduced by Johnson in 1972.
Abstract
We consider when certain Banach sequence algebras A on the set N are
approximately amenable. Some general results are obtained, and we resolve the special cases where A = ℓp for 1 ≤ p < ∞.
1
Introduction
The concept of amenability for a Banach algebra A, introduced by Johnson in 1972.
ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﭼﮑﯿﺪﻩ:۲.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ.۱ﻓﺼﻞ
۳۶
\newcommand{\thisname}{}
\newtheorem*{thisthm}{\thisname}
\newenvironment{namedthm}[1][Theorem]%
{\renewcommand{\thisname}{#1}\begin{thisthm}}{\end{thisthm}}
\begin{namedthm}[The Hausdorff Maximal Principle]
Every partially ordered set has a maximal linearly ordered subset.
\end{namedthm}
\begin{namedthm}[Zorn Lemma]
If $X$ is a partially ordered set and every linearly ordered subset of
$X$ has an upper bound, then $X$ has a maximal element.
\end{namedthm}
\begin{namedthm}
Let $X$ be a compact space. If $f:X\to\mathbb{R}$ is continuous then there
exist $p,q\in X$ such that, for every $x\in X$, $f(p)\leq f(x) \leq f(q)$.
\end{namedthm}
The Hausdorff Maximal Principle. Every partially ordered set has a maximal
linearly ordered subset.
Zorn Lemma. If X is a partially ordered set and every linearly ordered subset of X
has an upper bound, then X has a maximal element.
Theorem. Let X be a compact space. If f : X → R is continuous then there exist
p, q ∈ X such that, for every x ∈ X, f (p) ≤ f (x) ≤ f (q).
ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ:۳.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
۳۷
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ؛ ﻣﺜ ﻼً ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ
ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
\renewenvironmentﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ .ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
\renewenvironment{hold-env-namei}[hnumber i][hdefaulti]%
}{hbegin-def i
}{hend-def i
ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﯿﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \newenvironmentﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺰ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ hold-env-nameiﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ LaTEXﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
۵.۶.۱
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ
ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺯ ﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺯ ﻗﻔﺴﻪ
ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺭ ﻕ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ .ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎ ﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻫﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ،ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒﻫﺎ ،ﻟﻢﻫﺎ ،ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
• ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﯿﺸﮕﻔﺘﺎﺭ ،ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ
ﮐﻮﭼﮏ } {i, ii, iii, . . .ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ،
ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ } {1, 2, 3, . . .ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
• ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ } {1, 2, 3, . . .ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ {I, II, III,
} . . .ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
• ﺩﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ،ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ،ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ
2.1, 2.2, 2.3, . . .
1.1, 1.2, 1.3, . . .
۳۸
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
• ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﭘﯿﻮﺳﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺿﻤﯿﻤﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ
} {A, B, C, . . .ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ LaTEX ،ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﯿﺮﯼ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽﻫﺎﯼ LaTEXﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ،ﻫﯿﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ LaTEX .ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺷﯿﺌﯽ ﺭﺍ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ،
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯿﻮﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ
ﺗﺎ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ.
LaTEXﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ
ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ،ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ sectionﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
enumi
enumii
enumiii
enumiv
figure
table
footnote
mpfootnote
paragraph
subparagraph
page
equation
part
chapter
section
subsection
subsubsection
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ،ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﻢ ﺷﯿﺌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ
ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﯾﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ،
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺼﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ hchapter-titleiﺩﺭ LaTEXﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \chapter{hchapter-titleiﺑﮑﺎﺭ
ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ LaTEXﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ
ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ } \begin{equation} ... \end{equationﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ.
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺪﯾﺪﺁﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ
ﺷﯽﺀ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ LaTEX ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ chapter
ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ equationﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺁﻥ.
ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ hcounter iﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۳۹
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \value{hcounter iﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ! ( ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \thehcounter iﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ
ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ،ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ chapterﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ
۴ﻭ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ sectionﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ۳ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ chapter
ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ IVﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ sectionﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ IV.3ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۲.۱ﺩﺭ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۳۹ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ
ﻗﺎﻟﺐﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۲.۱ﺩﺳﺖ ﯾﺎﺑﯿﻢ ،ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﯾﻢ.
arabic
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺮﺑﯽ } {1, 2, 3, . . .ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
roman
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ } {i, ii, iii, . . .ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
Roman
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ } {I, II, III, . . .ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
alph
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ } {a, b, c, . . .
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ۱ﺗﺎ ۲۶ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Alph
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ } {A, B, C, . . .
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ۱ﺗﺎ ۲۶ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
fnsymbol
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﯽ
‡‡
∗،†† ،∗∗ ،k ،¶ ،§ ،‡ ،† ،
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ۱ﺗﺎ ۹ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻝ :۲.۱ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ
ﺟﺪﻭ ِ
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \Alph{chapterﺻﺎﺩﺭ
ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ Dﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }\roman{section
۴۰
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ iiiﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﮑﻞ ۴.۱ﺭﺍ
ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ.
ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
}\setcounter{hcounter i}{hvaluei
}}\setcounter{hcounter1 i}{\value{hcounter2 i
}\addtocounter{hcounter i}{hvaluei
}}\addtocounter{hcounter1 i}{\value{hcounter2 i
ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ hvalueiﯾﮏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ hcounter1 iﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ hcounter2 iﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺳﻮﻣﯿﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ hcounter iﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ hvalueiﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ.
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ hcounter iﺩﺭ
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒِ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \thehcounter iﻧﻬﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ
hcounter iﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾ ﻒِ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \thehcounter iﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ،ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ
،\renewcommandﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ .ﺷﮑﻞ ۴.۱ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ،ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ
ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \newcounterﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
]\newcounter{hnew-counter i}[hold-counter i
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hnew-counter iﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﯾﺪ ﻭ hold-counter iﻧﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ
ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
۴۱
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ۶.۱
\setcounter{section}{5}
\setcounter{subsection}{3}
\setcounter{equation}{8}
\renewcommand{\thesection}{\Alph{section}}
\renewcommand{\thesubsection}{\thesection.\Roman{subsection}}
\renewcommand{\theequation}{\thesubsection-\arabic{equation}}
\subsection{Counters}
\verb|\thesection|=\thesection,\hspace{\fill}
\verb|\alph{section}|=\alph{section}
\\
\verb|\thesubsection|=\thesubsection,\hspace{\fill}
\verb|\arabic{subsection}|=\arabic{subsection}
\\
\verb|\theequation|=\theequation,\hspace{\fill}
\verb|\roman{equation}|=\roman{equation}
\subsection{Conclusion}
Therefore,
\begin{equation}
a^2+b^2=c^2
\end{equation}
E.IV
Counters
\thesection=E,
\thesubsection=E.IV,
\theequation=E.IV-8,
E.V
\alph{section}=e
\arabic{subsection}=4
\roman{equation}=viii
Conclusion
Therefore,
a2 + b 2 = c2
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ:۴.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
(E.V-9)
۴۲
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ hold-counter iﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ hold-counter iﺑﺎﻋﺚ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ hold-counter iﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ hnew-counter iﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ،
ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﯼ sectionﻭ chapterﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ bookﻭ .report
ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻞﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
book.clsﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ،ﭼﯿﺰﯼ ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
}\newcounter{chapter
]\newcounter{section}[chapter
]\newcounter{subsection}[section
}}\newcommand{\thechapter}{\arabic{chapter
}}\newcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter.\arabic{section
}}\newcommand{\thesubsection}{\thesection.\arabic{subsection
۶.۶.۱
ﻃﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ LaTEXﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ
ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮ ﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ
ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ،ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ،ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ
ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ،ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ ،ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ ،ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۳.۱ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮ ﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEX
ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺷﮑﻞ ۱.۵ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ،۳۰۱ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ
ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۴.۱ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ
ﺷﺮﺡ
\paperwith
ﻋﺮﺽ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ
\paperheigh
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ
\oddsidemargin
\evensidemargin
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﭼﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏﺭ ﻭ
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺯ ﻭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ
\textwidth
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ
\topmargin
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﯾﯽ
\textheigh
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ
\linewidth
ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ
\parindent
ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ
\mathindent
۴۳
ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ
ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ِ
ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ fleqnﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \documentclassﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻝ :۳.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ LaTEX
ﺟﺪﻭ ِ
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۴۴
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ
)pt (point
)sp (scaled point
ﺷﺮﺡ
۱ pt = ۰/۰۱۳۸۳۷ in = ۰/۳۵۱ mm
ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ۶۵۵۳۶ sp = ۱ pt ،LaTEX
)bp (big point
۷۲ bp = ۱ in
)mm (milimeter
۱ mm = ۲/۸۴۵ pt
)pc (pica
۱ pc = ۱۲ pt = ۴/۲۱۸ mm
)cm (centimeter
۱ cm = ۱۰ mm = ۲/۳۷۱ pc
)in (inch
۱ in = ۲۵/۴ mm = ۷۲/۲۷ pt
ex
ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎً ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺮﻑ xﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ
em
ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒًﺎ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻑ Mﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ
mu
ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ۱۸ mu = ۱ em ،
ﻝ :۴.۱ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ LaTEX
ﺟﺪﻭ ِ
۴۵
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ.
ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
}\setlength{hlength-var i}{hlenght i
}\setlength{hlength-var1 i}{hlength-var2 i
}\addtolength{hlength-var i}{hlenght i
}\addtolength{hlength-var1 i}{hlength-var2 i
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hlength-var iﻧﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍ ﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ
hlengthiﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۴.۱ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ۱۴ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \setlength{\textwidth}{14cmﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ.
ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ۵.۱ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ،
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﯽ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ ،ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ
،\baselineskipﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ،ﮔﺰ ﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺧﻮ ﺑﯽ ﺑﻪﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ
ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ
ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ،\baselineskipﺿﺮﯾﺐ ﺁﻥ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ \baselinestretchﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ.
ﺍﯾﻦﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ،\renewcommandﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
}\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{hci
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hciﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍ ﮔﺮ hciﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻩﯼ ) (۰, ۱ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻪﻫﻢ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏ
ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ hciﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻩﯼ )∞ (۱,ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ.
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ.
ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \newlengthﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ
ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
}\newlength{hnew-length-var i
۴۶
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ.۱ﻓﺼﻞ
\verb|\baselineskip| is a length command which specifies the minimum
space between the bottom of two successive lines in a paragraph.
Its value may be automatically reset by \LaTeX, for example, by font
changes in the text.
\addtolength{\baselineskip}{1.5ex}
\verb|\baselinestretch| scales the value of \verb|\baselineskip|.
Its default value is $1.0$ but it may be reset with
a \verb|\renewcommand| command. If one wants to change the spacing in
a document one should reset \verb|\baselinestretch| and not
\verb|\baselineskip| as the latter may be reset automatically by \LaTeX{}
to account for local variations in the text, but it is always scaled by
the former.
\baselineskip is a length command which specifies the minimum space between the
bottom of two successive lines in a paragraph. Its value may be automatically reset
by LATEX, for example, by font changes in the text.
\baselinestretch scales the value of \baselineskip. Its default value is 1.0 but it
may be reset with a \renewcommand command. If one wants to change the spacing
in a document one should reset \baselinestretch and not \baselineskip as the
latter may be reset automatically by LATEX to account for local variations in the text,
but it is always scaled by the former.
ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ:۵.۱ ِﺷﮑﻞ
۴۷
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ۶.۱
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ. ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪhnew-length-var i ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ
. ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩLaTEX ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ،ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
\ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭthehlength-var i ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
.ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ
. ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ۶.۱ ﺷﮑﻞ. ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩhlength-var i ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ
\sffamily \verb|\oddsidemargin| = \the\oddsidemargin \hfill
\verb|\textwidth| = \the\textwidth \\[1ex]
\newlength{\mylen}\setlength{\mylen}{1em} 1em = \the\mylen \hfill
\addtolength{\mylen}{1ex}
1em + 1ex = \the\mylen \\[1ex]
\settowidth{\mylen}{abc} width of abc = \the\mylen \hfill
\settowidth{\mylen}{ABC}
width of ABC = \the\mylen \\ [1ex]
\settowidth{\mylen}{\Large ABC}
width of {\Large ABC} = \the\mylen
\oddsidemargin = 34.42784pt
1em = 10.00002pt
width of abc = 14.69447pt
width of
\textwidth = 369.31221pt
1em + 1ex = 14.44446pt
width of ABC = 19.72227pt
ABC = 27.68298pt
ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ:۶.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﯽﺀ، ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ، ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ۶.۱ ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ
ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥhlength-var i ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽhobject i
\settowidth{hlength-var i}{hobject i}
ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽhobject i ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺷﯽﺀ، ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ.ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ
. ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩhlength-var i
\settoheight{hlength-var i}{hobject i}
\settodepth{hlength-var i}{hobject i}
۴۸
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
۷.۶.۱
ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩﯼ
\smallskipamountﻭ \bigskipamountﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \smallskip
ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ \smallskipamountﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ،
ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \bigskipﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ
ﻃﻮﻟﯽ \bigskipamountﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﻧﯿﻢ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ،ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ،\the
ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ.
\hspace{\fill} \the\bigskipamount
12.0pt plus 4.0pt minus 4.0pt
\sffamily
\the\smallskipamount
3.0pt plus 1.0pt minus 1.0pt
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ \smallskipamountﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ 3ptﺍﺳﺖ ،ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ
ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ 1ptﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ 1ptﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ
ﻃﻮﻟﯽ \bigskipamountﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ 12ptﺍﺳﺖ ،ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ
4ptﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ 4ptﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ \smallskipamountﻭ \bigskipamountﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ
ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺖ LaTEX .ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ
ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ،ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ،ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ hδi ،hlengthiﻭ hεiﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ،ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ
ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ،ﮐﻪ hδiﻭ hεiﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ hlen-var iﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
}\setlength{hlen-var i}{hlengthi plus hεi minus hδi
ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ hlengthiﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ hlen-var iﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ hδiﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ hεiﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ.
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۴۹
ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ۶.۱
\sffamily \newlength{\mylength}
\setlength{\mylength}{.1in plus 2mm minus 5pt}
\addtolength{\mylength}{2ex}
7.22743pt plus 5.69054pt minus 5.0pt
\the\mylength \hfill
\the\mylength
16.11632pt plus 5.69054pt minus 5.0pt
\fill ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ،LaTEX ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﭘﺮﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ
.( ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ۰, ∞) ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻩﯼ.ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ
A B C \par
A B \hspace{\fill} C \par
ABC
A
AB
A
A \hspace{\fill} B C \par
A \hspace{\fill} B \hspace{\fill} C \par
BC
C
C
B
ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ
۸.۶.۱
LaTEX ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ، ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﯾﺮ، ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢLaTEX ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ
. ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ،ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
A box is any LATEX object that is treated as a unit (a single character).
Characters, framed text , graphics such as
A B
rials such as
are examples of boxes in LATEX.
C D
, and tabular mate-
framed text ﺗﺼﻮ ﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺏﺩﺍﺭ، ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﺟﺪﻭﻝLaTEX ،ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ
. ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ،ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ
LaTEX ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐLaTEX ﺩﺭ۲۳ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ
. ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ.ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ
23 Box
۵۰
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﮑﻞ ۷.۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ .ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ،LaTEXﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ
ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ،ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﯼ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ widthﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ
ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ totalheightﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
width
height
Reference
Point
totalheight
depth
Baseline
ﻞ :۷.۱ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﯾﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ LaTEX
ﺷﮑ ِ
ﻫﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ
ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ۲۴
ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ
ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ،ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻨﺠﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ
ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ،ﻣﺒﺪﺍٔ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ،
ﺧﻂ
ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ۲۵
ﺧﻄﯽ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻣﯽﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ
ﻃﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ.
24 Reference point
25 Baseline
۵۱
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ.
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ:
• ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ heightﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ heightﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ
ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ،
• ﻋﻤﻖ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ depthﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ depthﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺗﺎ
ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ،
• ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ widthﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ widthﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ
ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ،
• ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﮐﻞ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ totalheightﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ totalheightﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ
totalheight = height + depth.
LaTEXﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﻣﯽﭼﯿﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ
ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ LaTEX .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺷﯽﺀ ﮐﻪ
ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ
ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ
۲۶ ،EPS
ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺼﻮ ﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ LaTEXﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ۶ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺭﺩﻩﺍﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ tabularﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﻨﺪ.
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۶.۲ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﺪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ tabularﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎ ﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﮐﻪ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ
(۱ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ (۲ ،LRﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﻭ (۳ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ،Ruleﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺮﯾﺢ
26 Encapsulated PostScript
۵۲
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ.
ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ .LR
ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ۲۷ﭼﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ LR
ﻓﻘﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ
htext iﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ LRﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ.
}\mbox{htext i
}\fbox{htext i
}\makebox[hwidthi]{htext i
}\framebox[hwidthi]{htext i
}\makebox[htext-positioni][hwidthi]{htext i
}\framebox[htext-positioni][hwidthi]{htext i
ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \mboxﻭ \fboxﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ LRﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﯿﻖﺗﺮ ،ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ،۷.۱ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ
ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ LaTEXﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺷﯽﺀ
ﻭﺍﺣﺪﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ،ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ
ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
For instance, \fbox{some words} gives
some words whereas \mbox will do the
same thing, but without the ruled frame around
the text.
For instance,
\verb|\fbox{some words}| gives
\fbox{some words} whereas
\verb|\mbox| will do the
\mbox{same thing, but without
the ruled frame around} the text.
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ \mboxﻭ \fboxﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ htext i
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ
some thing, but without the ruled frame around
ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ
ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
27 Left-to-Right
۵۳
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ \makeboxﻭ ،\frameboxﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ،ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ \mboxﻭ \fbox
ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰ ﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ hwidthiﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ
ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺳﺖ ،ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ
ﮐﻨﺪ .ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ hwidthiﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ،htext iﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ htext iﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ
ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ،ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽﻣﺎﻧﺪ .ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ hwidthiﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ
ﻦ htext iﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ.
ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘ ِ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ!
}\framebox[5cm]{A few words of advice} \framebox{A few words of advice
}\framebox[2cm]{A few words of advice
A few words of advice
A few words of advice
A few words of advice
ﻭ ﺑﻼﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ،htext-positioniﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ \makeboxﻭ
،\frameboxﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﺎﯼﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ LRﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﮔﺰ ﯾﻨﻪﯼ
htext-positioniﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ } {l, c, r, sﺍﺳﺖ.
] [lﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
] [cﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ.
] [rﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
] [sﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ
ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ .ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ،hwidthi
ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ htext iﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
۵۴
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
]\\[1ex
]\\[1ex
]\\[1ex
\\
}of advice
}advice
}of advice
}of advice
\centering\fboxsep3pt
\framebox[.95\textwidth][l]{A few word
\framebox[.95\textwidth]{A few word of
\framebox[.95\textwidth][r]{A few word
\framebox[.95\textwidth][s]{A few word
A few word of advice
A few word of advice
A few word of advice
of
advice
word
ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ \fboxruleﻭ .\fboxsep
few
A
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ،ﺩﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \fboxﻭ
\frameboxﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ LRﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ
ﻃﻮﻟﯽ \fboxruleﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ .4ptﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺍﯼ
ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ \fboxsepﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ
ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ 3ptﺍﺳﺖ .ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۶.۶.۱ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺷﺪ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ \setlengthﻭ \addtolengthﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ
ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ،ﺳﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﻪﺍﯾﻢ.
}}{\setlength\fboxrule{2pt} \setlength\fboxsep{4pt} \fbox{some word
}}{\setlength\fboxrule{.5pt} \setlength\fboxsep{2pt} \fbox{some word
some word
ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ.
some word
ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ hwidthiﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺎ
ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ hwidthiﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ ،ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ،ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ
ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ ،LaTEXﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ،ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ
ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺵ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ؛ ﺭ ﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \parboxﺍﺳﺖ ،ﮐﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ
ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۵۵
۶.۱ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ
}\parbox[hbase-point-positioni]{hwidthi}{htext i
ﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ minipageﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮐﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
}\begib{minipage}[hbase-point-positioni]{hwidthi
htext i
}\end{minipage
ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ hwidthiﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ
LaTEXﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ hbase-point-positioni
ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ hbase-point-positioni
ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ } {t, c, bﺍﺳﺖ.
] [tﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺷﯽﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ،ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ
ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
] [cﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﻣﯽﺩﺍﻧﯿﻢ ،ﺍﺯ
ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ.
] [bﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺁﺧﺮ ﯾﻦ ﺷﯽﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ،
ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ] [tﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻘﻒِ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ
ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ] [bﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﮐﻒِ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ،ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ
ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ] [c] ،[bﻭ ] [tﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪﯼ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ
ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺷﮑﻞ ۸.۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ minipageﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۶.۶ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۳۵۲ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ .Rule
ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ Ruleﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻄﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ،ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ
ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺨﯿﻢ ﯾﺎ ﻧﺎﺯﮎ ،ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ،ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
۵۶
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ.۱ﻓﺼﻞ
\parbox{.35\textwidth}{This is the contents of the left-most parbox.}
\hrulefill\ Current Line \hrulefill\ \parbox{.35\textwidth}{This is
the right-most parbox. Note that the typeset text looks sloppy because
\LaTeX{} cannot nicely balance the material in these narrow columns.}
\begin{minipage}[b]{.3\linewidth}
The \verb|minipage| environment creates a vertical box like the
\verb|parbox| command. The bottom line of this \verb|minipage|
is aligned with the
\end{minipage}
\hrulefill\
\begin{minipage}[c]{.3\linewidth}
middle of this narrow \verb|parbox|, which in turn is
\end{minipage}
\hrulefill\
\begin{minipage}[t]{.3\linewidth}
the top line of the right hand {\tt minipage}. It is recommended that the
user experiment with the positioning arguments to get used to their effects.
\end{minipage}
This is the contents of the leftmost parbox.
The minipage environment creates a vertical
box like the parbox command. The bottom line of
this minipage is aligned
with the
Current Line
middle of this narrow
parbox, which in turn is
This is the right-most parbox. Note that the typeset text looks sloppy because
LATEX cannot nicely balance
the material in these narrow
columns.
the top line of the right
hand minipage. It is recommended that the user
experiment with the positioning arguments to get
used to their effects.
LaTEX ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ:۸.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
۵۷
۷.۱ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ
،\ruleﺑﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺯﯾﺮ ،ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ.
}\rule[hlifti]{hwidthi}{htotalheight i
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hwidthiﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ] = ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻂ [ ﻭ htotalheight iﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ] = ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ
ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻂ [ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ hlift iﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﮐﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ،ﮐﻪ
ﺑﻪﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﻣﺸﺨﺺﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻫﺴﺖ.
]\rule{\linewidth}{1pt} \\[2ex
text \rule{1.5cm}{1pt} text \rule{1cm}{2mm} text \rule{5mm}{1cm} text
}\rule[4mm]{1cm}{8mm} text \rule[-4mm]{1cm}{8mm} text \rule[-8mm]{1cm}{8mm
text
۹.۶.۱
text
text
text
text
text
ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ
ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ،۹.۱ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ
ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ LRﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
۷.۱
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ
ﺷﮑﻞِ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻭ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ،ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ
ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣٔﻮﻟﻔﻪﯼ ﺷﮑﻞِ
ﺗٔﺎﮐﯿﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﺑﯿﺪﻩ ،italic ،ﻣﯽﻧﻮ ﯾﺴﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ
ﻗﻠﻢ ۲۸
ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ
ﻗﻠﻢ ۲۹
ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ
28 Font shape
29 Font size
۵۸
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ.۱ﻓﺼﻞ
\centering
\fboxrule2pt\fboxsep2pt\fbox{\fboxrule.5pt\fboxsep3mm\fbox{%
\begin{minipage}{.9\linewidth}
The box commands described above may be nested to any desired level.
Including an LR-box within a paragraph-box or a \texttt{minipage} causes
no obvious conceptual difficulties. The opposite, a paragraph-box within
an LR-box, is also possible, and is easy to visualize if one keeps in mind
that every box is a unit, treated by \LaTeX{} as a single character of
the corresponding size
\end{minipage}}}
The box commands described above may be nested to any desired level.
Including an LR-box within a paragraph-box or a minipage causes no obvious
conceptual difficulties. The opposite, a paragraph-box within an LR-box, is
also possible, and is easy to visualize if one keeps in mind that every box is
a unit, treated by LATEX as a single character of the corresponding size
ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ:۹.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ. ﺳﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﻪﺍﯾﻢtypewriter ﺍﺯ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ،ﻣﺤﺘﻮ ﯾﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ
: ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩ
We can also produce smaller and
bigger type.
ﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ
ِ ﺷﮑ
۱.۷.۱
ﻝ
ِ ﺟﺪﻭ. ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩFamily ﻭSeries ،Shape ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﯼLaTEX ﺩﺭ
، ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ، ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎ۵.۱
\ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺎtextit{\textbf{Some text}} ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ، ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ.ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ
ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﯼ
Shape=Italic, Series=Boldface, Family=Roman
. ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪSome text ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ، ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩSome text ﻦ
ِ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘ
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۵۹
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ۷.۱
Shape
Series
Family
Font styles
Declaration
Command
upright shape
{\upshape htext i}
\textup{htext i}
italic shape
{\itshape htext i}
\textit{htext i}
Slanted shape
{\slshape htext i}
\textsl{htext i}
Small Caps shape
{\scshape htext i}
\textsc{htext i}
Medium series
{\mdseries htext i}
\textmd{htext i}
Boldface series
{\bfseries htext i}
\textbf{htext i}
Roman family
{\rmfamily htext i}
\textrm{htext i}
Sans serif family
{\sffamily htext i}
\textsf{htext i}
Typewrite family
{\ttfamily htext i}
\texttt{htext i}
ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦِ ﺷﮑﻞِ ﻗﻠﻢ:۵.۱ ﻝ
ِ ﺟﺪﻭ
Series=Medium ،Shape=Upright ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﯼ، ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ،ﻗﻠﻢ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ
ِ
. ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ. ﺍﺳﺖFamily=Roman ﻭ
\textsf{\textbf{Sans Serif family, Boldface Series, Upright Shape.}}
\\[.5ex]
\textbf{\slshape Roman family, Boldface Series, Slanted shape.}
\\[.5ex]
{\scshape \ttfamily Typewriter family, Medium series, Small Caps shape.}
Sans Serif family, Boldface Series, Upright Shape.
Roman family, Boldface Series, Slanted shape.
Typewriter family, Medium series, Small Caps shape.
ﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ
ِ ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭ
ِ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﯼ ﺷﮑ، ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ۵.۱ ﻝ
:ﺩﺍﺩ
،\textbf{htext i} ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ،‐ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ۱
ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ،ﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ
ِ ‐ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘ۲
.{\bfseries htext i}
ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ، ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥِ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ،ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ
ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭﻻً ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ
۶۰
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ،ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ
ﺁﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ؛ ﺑﺨﺶ ۸.۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ۱۰.۱ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﭼﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﯼ
ﻗﻠﻢ \bfseriesﺑﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
\\
\\
]\\[1ex
\\
\\
\textbf{triangle}, we mean a polygon of three sides.
{\bfseries triangle}, we mean a polygon of three sides.
\bfseries triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.
\textit{triangle}, we mean a polygon of three sides.
{\itshape triangle}, we mean a polygon of three sides.
\itshape triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.
a
a
a
a
a
a
By
By
By
By
By
By
By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.
By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.
By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.
By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.
By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.
By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.
ﻞ :۱۰.۱ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ
ﺷﮑ ِ
ﻝ ۵.۱ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ
ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭ ِ
ﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ
ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﺩ .ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝِ ﺷﮑ ِ
ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺳﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺖ Sans Serif
ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ sffamilyﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ؛ ﺷﮑﻞ ۱۱.۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ،ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﻭﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ LaTEX ،ﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ
ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺳ ِ
ِ
ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ۳۰
ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
ِ
ﺶ ۲.۳.۱ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ
ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \emphﺭﺍ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝِ ﺑﺨ ِ
ﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ Shape=Uprightﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }\emph{htext i
ﮐﺮﺩ .ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﻢ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿ ِ
ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ htext iﺑﻪ Shape=Italicﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ
ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿ ﺖِ ﻗﻠﻢ Shape=Italicﯾﺎ Shape=Slantedﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \emph{htext iﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺣﺎﺻﻞ
30 Warning
۶۱
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ۷.۱
These declaration names can also be used as environment names:%
\begin{sffamily}
Thus to typeset a long passage in, say, \verb|sans serif| family,
just enclose the passage within the commands
\verb|\begin{sffamily} ... \end{sffamily}|.
\end{sffamily}
These declaration names can also be used as environment names: Thus to typeset a
long passage in, say, sans serif family, just enclose the passage within the commands
\begin{sffamily} ... \end{sffamily}.
. ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﺩ:۱۱.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
. ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ۱۲.۱ ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟ ﺷﮑﻞ
A polygon
\textit{A
\textsl{A
\textbf{A
\textsc{A
of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}. \\
polygon of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}.} \\
polygon of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}.} \\
polygon of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}.} \\
polygon of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}.}
A polygon of three sides is called a triangle.
A polygon of three sides is called a triangle.
A polygon of three sides is called a triangle.
A polygon of three sides is called a triangle.
A polygon of three sides is called a triangle.
\emph ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ:۱۲.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ
۲.۷.۱
ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ،point ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ10pt ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼLaTEX ، ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ. ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ،pt ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﯼ
۶.۱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝLaTEX ﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ
ِ ﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ.ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ
۶۲
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ،\normalsizeﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ
ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠ ﻢ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ \tiny .ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ \Hugeﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ
ِ
ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ.
example
declaration
\tiny
\scriptsize
\footnotesize
\small
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
\normalsize
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
\large
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy
\Large
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The
\LARGE
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over
\huge
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps
\Huge
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
ﻝ :۶.۱ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ LaTEX
ﺟﺪﻭ ِ
ﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝِ ،۵.۱ﻫﻤﮕﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ
ﺑﺮﺧﻼ ِ
ﻑ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑ ِ
ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ.
ِ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﺩ؛ ﺷﮑﻞ ۱۳.۱ﺭﺍ
ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺐ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﯼ ﻭﺳﯿﻊ ﻭ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺳﺖ
ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿ ِ
ِ
ﻞ ۱۴.۱ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ
ﯾﺎﻓﺖ .ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑ ِ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺷﮑﻞ ۱۴.۱ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺁﻧﭽﻪ
ﺑﯿﻦ } \begin{centerﻭ } \end{cenerﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﻗﯿﻘﺎً ﻭﺳﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﯿﻦ } \begin{flushrightﻭ } \end{flushrightﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ
۷.۱ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ
۶۳
These declaration names can also be used as environment names:%
}\begin{footnotesize
Thus to typeset a long passage in, say, \verb|footnotesize| size,
just enclose the passage within the
commands
\verb|\begin{footnotesize} ... \end{footnotesize}|.
}\end{footnotesize
These declaration names can also be used as environment names: Thus to typeset a long passage in, say, footnotesize size, just enclose the passage within the commands
\begin{footnotesize} ... \end{footnotesize}.
ﺷﮑﻞِ :۱۳.۱ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﺩ.
ﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﺳﻤﺖِ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺯ }\begin{flushleft
ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿ ِ
ﻭ } \end{flushleftﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﺳﻤﺖِ ﭼﭗ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ
ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯼ ۱.۴.۲ﻭ ۲.۴.۲ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
۳.۷.۱
ﻗﻠﻢ Timesﻭ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ
ِ
LaTEXﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢ ،Computer Modernﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﯼ ،CMﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ
ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﻧﺎﻟﺪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ TEXﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪ ،ﺯﯾﺮﺍ TEX
ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ Computer Modernﻗﻠﻤﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ
ﮐﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ .ﺍﻣﺎ Computer Modernﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻠﻤﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۷.۱ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ
ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠ ﻢ Times New Romanﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ timesﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ
ِ
ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢ Pandoraﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ pandoraﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ
ِ
ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎﯼ ۱۵.۱ﻭ ۱۶.۱ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
ﻝ ۷.۱ﺩﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭ ِ
ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ \fontfamilyﻭ \selectfontﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
۶۴
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ.۱ﻓﺼﻞ
\begin{center}
{\bfseries \huge The \TeX nical Institute}\\[.75cm]
{\scshape\LARGE Certificate}
\end{center}
\noindent This is to certify that Mr.~N.~O.~Vice has undergone a course
at this institute and is qualified to be a \TeX nician.
\begin{flushright}
\sffamily The Director\\ The \TeX nical Institute
\end{flushright}
The TEXnical Institute
Certificate
This is to certify that Mr. N. O. Vice has undergone a course at this institute and is
qualified to be a TEXnician.
The Director
The TEXnical Institute
ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻢ:۱۴.۱ ِﺷﮑﻞ
۶۵
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ۷.۱
font name
font
family
Computer
Modern
Roman
cmr
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Computer
Modern
Sans
cmss
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Computer
Modern
Typewriter
cmtt
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Pandora
panr
Pandora
Sans
pss
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:
Pandora
Typewriter
pntt
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:
Universal
uni
! " #$ % ' () * + , -* . /$ 0 1 2 34 " )
Concrete
ccr
ccr
Avant
Grade
pag
avant
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Bookman
pbk
bookman
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Courier
pcr
courier
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The ...
Helvetica
phv
helvet
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
New
Century
Schoolbook
pnc
newcent
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Palatino
ppl
palatino
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Times New
Roman
ptm
times
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Zapf
Chancery
pzc
zapfchan
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Charter
bch
charter
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
URW
Antiqua
uaq
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
URW
Grotesk
ugq
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
Utopia
put
package
pandora
utopia
example
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:
!" 5 5 5
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog
LaTEX ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ:۷.۱ ﻝ
ِ ﺟﺪﻭ
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۶۶
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ.۱ﻓﺼﻞ
% in preamble: \usepackage{times}
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps
\textit{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps
\textsl{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps
\textsc{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps
\textbf{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps
\texttt{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps
\textsf{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps
Over
Over
Over
Over
Over
Over
Over
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Dog.
Dog.}
Dog.}
Dog.}
Dog.}
Dog.}
Dog.}
\\[.5ex]
\\[.5ex]
\\[.5ex]
\\[1ex]
\\[1ex]
\\[.5ex]
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog.
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog.
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog.
T HE Q UICK B ROWN F OX J UMPS OVER T HE L AZY D OG .
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog.
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog.
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog.
Times ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ:۱۵.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
ِ
% in preamble: \usepackage{bookman}
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over
\textit{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over
\textsl{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over
\textsc{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over
\textbf{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over
\texttt{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over
\textsf{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Lazy
Dog.
Dog.}
Dog.}
Dog.}
Dog.}
Dog.}
Dog.}
\\[.5ex]
\\[.5ex]
\\[.5ex]
\\[1ex]
\\[1ex]
\\[.5ex]
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:;
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:;
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:;
! # "#$% ( &'() - '* / "+,- 3 .!& ! 5 /01 9 '2 ;
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:;
The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog.
!" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:;
Bookman ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ:۱۶.۱ ِﺷﮑﻞ
ِ
۶۷
۸.۱ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺁﻥ
}{\fontfamily{hfont-familyi}\selectfont htext i
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hfont-familyiﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﻠ ﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۷.۱ﺯﯾﺮ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ font
ِ
familyﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﯽ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ،ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ۸.۱ﺭﺍ
ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ.
{\fontfamily{phv} \selectfont Helvetica looks like this.} \hfill
{\fontfamily{bch} \selectfont Charter looks like this.} \hfill
}{\fontfamily{pag} \selectfont Avant Grade looks like this.
!"#$ %&"'( )**+, )-+( $.-,/
۸.۱
Charter looks like this.
Helvetica looks like this.
ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺁﻥ
ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۱.۱ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۲۱ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ،ﮐﺮﺍ ﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﯼ
ﮐﺮﺍ ﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﺮﺟﺎ
ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﺍﯼ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ { ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ } ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ
ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ } ﻣﮑﻤﻞ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ { ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ {\ ﯾﺎ }\ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻨﺪ.
ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ،ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﺜﻼً ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \LaTeXCommandﻋﻤﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ
hobjectsiﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ،ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ؛ }.\LaTeXCommand{hobjectsi
ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ hobject iﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﺑﻪﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﯾﻦ
ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
first document.
f irst document.
f irst document.
first document.
my
my
my
my
is
is
is
is
This
This
This
This
\\\emph{first} document.
\\ \emph first document.
\\\textbf first document.
\textbf{first} document.
my
my
my
my
is
is
is
is
This
This
This
This
۶۸
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ .ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ
ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺗٔﺎﺛﯿﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ،ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۵.۱ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۵۹ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ۶.۱ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ،۶۲ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩﯼ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ
ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪﯼ ﻣﻌﯿﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ.
This is my first document
This is my first document
This is my first document
This is my {\itshape first} document
\\ This is my \itshape first document
This is my {\large first} document
ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ .ﺩﺭ
ﺑﺨﺶ ۴.۳ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ۱۵۵ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﺗﺸﺮﯾﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ
ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﺑﺮ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ.
[\
a^bc,\quad a^{bc},\quad \frac123,\quad \frac1{23},\quad \frac{12}3,\quad
\int_2\pi^3\pi f,\quad \int_{2\pi}^{3\pi} f,\quad
)\lim_x\to\infty f(x),\quad \lim_{x\to\infty} f(x
]\
3π
)lim f (x
∞→x
lim → ∞f (x),
x
f,
Z
2π
3
π πf,
2
Z
12
,
3
1
,
23
1
3,
2
bc
a ,
b
a c,
ﯾﮑﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ LaTEXﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ،ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﯾﮏ
ﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﯽﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ
ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۶۹
۹.۱ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ
Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual
\begin{itshape}%
under the conditions for \bfseries verbatim copying,
\end{itshape}%
provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed
under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one.
Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under
the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work
is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one.
ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ.
ﺍ ﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ
ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ۳۱
ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺮﺍ ﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ
ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ،ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﯾﻪﯼ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﻢ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ
}}}{A {B {C D
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺳﻪ ﻻﯾﻪ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ،ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ A, B, C,
Dﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻻﯾﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ ،ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ B, C, Dﺩﺭ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻻﯾﻪﯼ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ C, Dﺩﺭ
ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻻﯾﻪﯼ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
۹.۱
ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ
ﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ ،ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪ،
ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ً
ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﮔﺮ ﯾﺰ ﻧﺎﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺼﻞ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ،
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ
ﻣﻌﯿﻦ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ LaTEXﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺁﯾﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ
31 Grouping
۷۰
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﯾﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺳﭙﺎﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ؟ ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ
ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ؛ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ،ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ
ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ.
ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ،ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥﻧﺎﻣﻪ،
ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﻃﺎﻗﺖﻓﺮﺳﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ ،ﺑﺎ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ،LaTEXﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﮔﺸﺘﻪ
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩﯼ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ:
ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺼﻞ ،ﯾﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ ،ﯾﮏ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ
ﻗﻀﯿﻪ ،ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ
ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ۳۲
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺳﭙﺲ ،ﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ ﺫﮐﺮ
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ،ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻬﻢ
ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ،ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ،LaTEXﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ
ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ LaTEXﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺩﺭ LaTEXﺍﺷﯿﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ،ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ
ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ:
ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺋﯽ ﻧﻈﯿﺮ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ،ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ ،ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ
ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ۳۳ ،
ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ،
ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺍﺭ،
ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺳﻮﻡ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺧﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ.
ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ.
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ
ﺁﻥ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
} \label{hlabel iﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ hlabel i ،ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ،ﺑﻪﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ،ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ
ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ،hlabel iﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﭘﯽ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ،ﺳﻮﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
32 Label
۳۳ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒﻫﺎ ،ﻟﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
۷۱
۹.۱ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ
• ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ hlabel iﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ،ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ
ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﺮﻁ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ LaTEXﭘﯿﺮ ﻭﯼ ﮐﻨﺪ.
• ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ hlabel iﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﯾﺎﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﺎﻥﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺼﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ Introductionﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ chap:introﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
Introductionﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ sec:introﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺑﻪﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ.
• ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ LaTEX ،ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﯿﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ
ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ،ﺩﺭ ،hlabel iﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ Sec:intro ،sec:introﻭ
sec: introﺳﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ.
• ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ،ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ
ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ،ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ chap:ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ،ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ sec:ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ،ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ
eqn:ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ،ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ thm:ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ fig:ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ.
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ ،ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }\label{hlabel i
ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ،ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } ،\ref{hlabel iﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ
ﺷﯽﺀ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﺪ ،ﺑﻬﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ،\labelﺑﺮﺍﯼ
ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺍﺭ ،ﮐﺠﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ،ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯽ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﺷﮑﻞ ۱۷.۱ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ.
ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ.
ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ،ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ،
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ .ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \pageref{hlabel iﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ
ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ hlabel iﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ.
ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ.
ﻭ ۲.۶.۴ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ،ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ،ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯼ ۱.۶.۴
۷۲
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﺷﮑﻞ ۱۷.۱ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ.
ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﺎﯼﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \labelﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ،
ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \eqrefﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ
amsmathﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ } \eqref{hlabel iﻫﻢﺍﺭ ﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ )}(\ref{hlabel i
ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱۰.۳ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ
ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ۱۴.۳ﺗﺸﺮﯾﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
۱۰.۱
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ
ﻭﻗﺘﯽ LaTEXﺑﻪ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ %ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ ،ﻋﻼﻣﺖ %ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ،
ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ LaTEXﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺍﺯ
ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ:
‐۱ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ LaTEXﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ،
‐۲ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ،
‐۳ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ،ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ.
This is an example:
Supercalifragilisticeexpialidocious
Helloworld
Hello World
This is an % stupid
% Better: instructive <--\\example:
Supercal%
ifragilist%
\\iceexpialidocious
Hello%
\\world
Hello
World
۷۳
ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ۱۰.۱
\section{Analytic Functions}\label{sec:AF}
If the development in this section has familiar ring, it should.
\begin{dfn}\label{dfn:differentiable}
A complex-valued function $f(z)$ is \emph{differentiable} at $z_0$
if the difference quotients
\begin{equation}\label{eqn:derivative}
\frac{f(z)-f(z_0)}{z-z_0}
\end{equation}
have a limit as $z\to z_0$.
\end{dfn}
\subsection{Chain Rule}\label{subsec:chain rule}
\begin{thm}\label{thm:hain rule}
Suppose that $g(z)$ is differentiable at $z_0$, and suppose that
$f(w)$ is differentiable at $w_0=g(z_0)$. Then \ldots
\end{thm}
\subsection{Cross Reference}
See section~\ref{sec:AF} and subsection~\ref{subsec:chain rule}\\
Definition~\ref{dfn:differentiable} and Theorem~\ref{thm:hain rule}\\
Equation~\eqref{eqn:derivative}
1
Analytic Functions
If the development in this section has familiar ring, it should.
Definition 1.1. A complex-valued function f (z) is differentiable at z0 if the difference
quotients
f (z) − f (z0 )
(1.1)
z − z0
have a limit as z → z0 .
1.1
Chain Rule
Theorem 1.2. Suppose that g(z) is differentiable at z0 , and suppose that f (w) is
differentiable at w0 = g(z0 ). Then . . .
1.2
Cross Reference
See section 1 and subsection 1.1
Definition 1.1 and Theorem 1.2
Equation (1.1)
ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽLaTEX ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ:۱۷.۱ ﻞ
ِ ﺷﮑ
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۷۴
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ.۱ﻓﺼﻞ
. ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩcomment ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ
ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ، ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ،[۳۳] ،verbatim ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼcomment ﻣﺤﯿﻂ
ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥverbatim ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮ ﻭﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ
\ ﻭdocumentclass ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ،ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ
ِ \ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾusepackage{verbatim}
. ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ،\begin{document} ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
This is another \begin{comment}
rather stupid, but helpful
\end{comment}
example for embedding comments in your document.
This is another example for embedding comments in your document.
ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩﺍﯼ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻧﻮ ﯾﺴﯽ ﺭ ﯾﺎﺿﯽ،ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ
.ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻣﺪ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ
ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ، ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪcomment ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ
. ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ، ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ.ﻧﻤﻮﺩ
\documentclass{articel}
\begin{document}
Some text ...
\begin{comment}
Commented out text ...
\begin{comment}
Some more commented out text ...
\end{comment}
and some more commented out text ...
\end{comment}
\end{document}
ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼLaTEX ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ، ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺎﻻLaTEX ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ
LaTeX Error: \begin{document} ended by \end{comment}
ﮐﺠﺎ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟.ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ
۷۵
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ۱۱.۱
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ
۱۱.۱
ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ، ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ،ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ، ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ،ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ
ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﯾﻦ ﺷﯿﻮﻩ،LaTEX ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ،ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ
.ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ
There is a
\texttt{verbatim} environment. You
may need it if
write \emph{about} \LaTeX{} or
some other computer program
or if you have to
include
portions of a source file or user
input.
you
There is a verbatim environment. You may need it if you write about LATEX or some
other computer program or if you have to include portions of a source file or user
input.
ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﯿﻨﺎً ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ،ﺍﻣﺎ
ﺍﯾﻦ.ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ
۳۴ ﻟﻔﻆ
ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ،ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ
،ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ
.ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ
. ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖverbatim ﻣﺤﯿﻂ، ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ،LaTEX ﺩﺭ
\begin{verbatim}
There is a
\texttt{verbatim} environment. You
may need it if
write \emph{about} \LaTeX{} or
some other computer program
or if you have to
include
portions of a source file or user
input.
\end{verbatim}
you
There is a
\texttt{verbatim} environment. You
may need it if
write \emph{about} \LaTeX{} or
some other computer program
or if you have to
include
portions of a source file or user
input.
you
ﻋﯿﻨﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻭ، ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖverbatim ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ،ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ
.ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ
34 Verbatim
www.rasekhoon.net/software
۷۶
ﻓﺼﻞ .۱ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ
ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ verbatimﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ .ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ
ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ.
}\documentclass{article
}\begin{document
Some text ...
}\begin{verbatim
Verbatim text
}\begin{verbatim
Some more verbatim text ...
}\end{verbatim
and some more verbatim text ...
}\end{verbatim
}\end{document
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ LaTEXﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ ،ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ LaTEXﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ
}LaTeX Error: \begin{document} ended by \end{verbatim
ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﮐﺠﺎ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ.
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﯽ
ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﯽﮐﻨﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ،ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ
ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \verbﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ.
$ \sin^2 x + \cos^2 x = 1 $
|\verb|$ \sin^2 x + \cos^2 x = 1 $
ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ،ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \verbﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ | | ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ
ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \verbﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ.
ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍ ﮔﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \verbﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺮﺍ ﮐﺘﺮ | ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﯾﮕﺮ
ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯼ | | ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ .ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ،ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ
|\verb|$ |\sin x| \leq |x| $
ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ LaTEXﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ؛
Missing $ inserted
ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ،ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﭼﻮﻥ +ﻭ -ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ.
۷۷
\verb+ |\sin(x)| \leq |x| + \\
\verb- |x| + |y| = 1 - \\
\verb@ |x| + |y| - |z| @ \\
\verb|
@|
ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ۱۱.۱
|\sin(x)| \leq |x|
|x| + |y| = 1
|x| + |y| - |z|
@